1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4 *
5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2021 Intel Corporation
11 */
12
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <linux/android_kabi.h>
22 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
23 #include <net/codel.h>
24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
25 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
26
27 /**
28 * DOC: Introduction
29 *
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33 * drivers.
34 */
35
36 /**
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38 *
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44 * tasklet function.
45 *
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
48 */
49
50 /**
51 * DOC: Warning
52 *
53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55 */
56
57 /**
58 * DOC: Frame format
59 *
60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63 * hardware.
64 *
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66 *
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69 *
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
72 */
73
74 /**
75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76 *
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81 *
82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83 * suspend.
84 *
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86 *
87 */
88
89 /**
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91 *
92 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94 * between different stations/interfaces.
95 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98 *
99 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100 * driver operation.
101 *
102 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
103 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
104 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
105 *
106 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
107 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
108 *
109 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
110 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
111 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
112 *
113 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
114 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
115 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
116 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
117 * ieee80211_return_txq().
118 *
119 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
120 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
121 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
122 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
123 * .release_buffered_frames().
124 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
125 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
126 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
127 */
128
129 struct device;
130
131 /**
132 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
133 *
134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
135 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
136 */
137 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
138 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
139 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
140 };
141
142 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
143
144 /**
145 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
147 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
149 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
150 */
151 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
152 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
153 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
154 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
155 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
156 };
157
158 /**
159 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
160 *
161 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
162 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
163 *
164 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
165 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
166 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
167 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
168 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
169 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
170 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
171 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
172 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
173 */
174 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
175 u16 txop;
176 u16 cw_min;
177 u16 cw_max;
178 u8 aifs;
179 bool acm;
180 bool uapsd;
181 bool mu_edca;
182 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
183 };
184
185 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
186 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
187 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
188 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
189 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
190 };
191
192 /**
193 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
197 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
198 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
199 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
200 */
201 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
203 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
204 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
205 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
206 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
207 };
208
209 /**
210 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
211 *
212 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
213 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
214 *
215 * @def: the channel definition
216 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
217 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
218 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
219 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
220 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
221 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
222 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
223 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
224 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
225 */
226 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
227 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
228 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
229
230 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
231
232 bool radar_enabled;
233
234 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
235 };
236
237 /**
238 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
239 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
240 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
241 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
242 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
243 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
244 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
245 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
246 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
247 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
248 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
249 * for changes/removal.)
250 */
251 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
252 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
253 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
254 };
255
256 /**
257 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
258 *
259 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
260 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
261 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
262 * done.
263 *
264 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
265 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
266 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
267 */
268 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
269 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
271 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
272 };
273
274 /**
275 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
276 *
277 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
278 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
279 *
280 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
281 * also implies a change in the AID.
282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
284 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
285 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
288 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
289 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
290 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
291 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
292 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
293 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
294 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
295 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
296 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
297 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
298 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
299 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
300 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
301 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
302 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
303 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
304 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
305 * changed
306 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
307 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
308 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
309 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
310 * context had been assigned.
311 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
312 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
313 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
314 * keep alive) changed.
315 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
316 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
317 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
318 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
320 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
321 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
322 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
323 * status changed.
324 *
325 */
326 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
327 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
328 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
329 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
330 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
331 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
332 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
333 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
334 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
335 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
336 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
337 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
338 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
339 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
340 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
341 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
342 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
343 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
344 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
345 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
346 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
347 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
348 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
349 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
350 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
351 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
352 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
353 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26,
354 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27,
355 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28,
356 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29,
357 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30,
358 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
359
360 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
361 };
362
363 /*
364 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
365 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
366 * filtering will be disabled.
367 */
368 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
369
370 /**
371 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
372 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
373 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
374 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
375 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
376 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
377 * once each time the timeout triggers.
378 */
379 enum ieee80211_event_type {
380 RSSI_EVENT,
381 MLME_EVENT,
382 BAR_RX_EVENT,
383 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
384 };
385
386 /**
387 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
388 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
389 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
390 */
391 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
392 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
393 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
394 };
395
396 /**
397 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
398 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
399 */
400 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
401 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
402 };
403
404 /**
405 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
406 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
407 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
408 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
409 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
410 */
411 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
412 AUTH_EVENT,
413 ASSOC_EVENT,
414 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
415 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
416 };
417
418 /**
419 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
420 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
421 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
422 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
423 */
424 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
425 MLME_SUCCESS,
426 MLME_DENIED,
427 MLME_TIMEOUT,
428 };
429
430 /**
431 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
432 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
433 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
434 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
435 */
436 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
437 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
438 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
439 u16 reason;
440 };
441
442 /**
443 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
444 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
445 * @tid: the tid
446 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
447 */
448 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
449 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
450 u16 tid;
451 u16 ssn;
452 };
453
454 /**
455 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
456 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
457 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
458 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
459 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
460 * @u:union holding the fields above
461 */
462 struct ieee80211_event {
463 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
464 union {
465 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
466 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
467 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
468 } u;
469 };
470
471 /**
472 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
473 *
474 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
475 *
476 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
477 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
478 */
479 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
480 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
481 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
482 };
483
484 /**
485 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
486 *
487 * @lci: LCI subelement content
488 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
489 * @lci_len: LCI data length
490 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
491 */
492 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
493 const u8 *lci;
494 const u8 *civicloc;
495 size_t lci_len;
496 size_t civicloc_len;
497 };
498
499 /**
500 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
501 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
502 *
503 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
504 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
505 */
506 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
507 u32 min_interval;
508 u32 max_interval;
509 };
510
511 /**
512 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
513 *
514 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
515 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
516 *
517 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
518 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
519 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
520 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
521 * ACK, BACK or both
522 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
523 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
524 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
525 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
526 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
527 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
528 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
529 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
530 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT
531 * @assoc: association status
532 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
533 * or not
534 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
535 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
536 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
537 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
538 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
539 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
540 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
541 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
542 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
543 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
544 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
545 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
546 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
547 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
548 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
549 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
550 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
551 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
552 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
553 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
554 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
555 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
556 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
557 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
558 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
559 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
560 * the current band.
561 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
562 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
563 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
564 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
565 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
566 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
567 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
568 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
569 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
570 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
571 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
572 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
573 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
574 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
575 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
576 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
577 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
578 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
579 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
580 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
581 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
582 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
583 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
584 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
585 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
586 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
587 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
588 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
589 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
590 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
591 * your driver/device needs to do.
592 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
593 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
594 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
595 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
596 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
597 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured.
598 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
599 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
600 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
601 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
602 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
603 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
604 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
605 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
606 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
607 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
608 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
609 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
610 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
611 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
612 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
613 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
614 * station.
615 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
616 * responder functionality.
617 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
618 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
619 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
620 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
621 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
622 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
623 * nontransmitted BSSIDs
624 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
625 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
626 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
627 * connected to (STA)
628 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
629 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
630 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
631 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
632 * interval.
633 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
634 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
635 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
636 */
637 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
638 const u8 *bssid;
639 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
640 bool uora_exists;
641 u8 uora_ocw_range;
642 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
643 bool he_support;
644 bool twt_requester;
645 bool twt_responder;
646 bool twt_protected;
647 bool twt_broadcast;
648 /* association related data */
649 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
650 bool ibss_creator;
651 u16 aid;
652 /* erp related data */
653 bool use_cts_prot;
654 bool use_short_preamble;
655 bool use_short_slot;
656 bool enable_beacon;
657 u8 dtim_period;
658 u16 beacon_int;
659 u16 assoc_capability;
660 u64 sync_tsf;
661 u32 sync_device_ts;
662 u8 sync_dtim_count;
663 u32 basic_rates;
664 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
665 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
666 u16 ht_operation_mode;
667 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
668 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
669 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
670 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
671 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
672 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
673 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
674 int arp_addr_cnt;
675 bool qos;
676 bool idle;
677 bool ps;
678 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
679 size_t ssid_len;
680 bool hidden_ssid;
681 int txpower;
682 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
683 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
684 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
685 u16 max_idle_period;
686 bool protected_keep_alive;
687 bool ftm_responder;
688 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
689 /* Multiple BSSID data */
690 bool nontransmitted;
691 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
692 u8 bssid_index;
693 u8 bssid_indicator;
694 bool ema_ap;
695 u8 profile_periodicity;
696 struct {
697 u32 params;
698 u16 nss_set;
699 } he_oper;
700 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
701 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
702 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
703 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
704 bool s1g;
705 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
706
707 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
708 };
709
710 /**
711 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
712 *
713 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
714 *
715 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
716 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
717 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
718 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
719 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
720 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
721 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
722 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
723 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
724 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
725 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
726 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
727 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
728 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
729 * station
730 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
731 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
732 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
733 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
734 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
735 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
736 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
737 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
738 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
739 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
740 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
741 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
742 * hardware queue.
743 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
744 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
745 * is for the whole aggregation.
746 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
747 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
748 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
749 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
750 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
751 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
752 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
753 * off-channel operation.
754 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
755 * (header conversion)
756 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
757 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
758 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
759 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
760 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
761 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
762 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
763 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
764 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
765 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
766 * queue gets full.
767 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
768 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
769 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
770 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
771 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
772 * should kick the MLME state machine.
773 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
774 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
775 * status to user space)
776 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
777 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
778 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
779 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
780 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
781 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
782 * handled properly by the device.
783 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
784 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
785 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
786 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
787 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
788 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
789 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
790 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
791 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
792 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
793 * PS-Poll responses.
794 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
795 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
796 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
797 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
798 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
799 * monitor injection).
800 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
801 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
802 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
803 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
804 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
805 *
806 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
807 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
808 */
809 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
810 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
811 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
812 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
813 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
814 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
815 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
816 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
817 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
818 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
819 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
820 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
821 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
822 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
823 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
824 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14),
825 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
826 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
827 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
828 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
829 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
830 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
831 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
832 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
833 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
834 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
835 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
836 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
837 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
838 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
839 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
840 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
841 };
842
843 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
844
845 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
846
847 /**
848 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
849 *
850 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
851 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
852 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
853 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
854 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
855 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
856 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
857 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
858 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
859 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
860 * it can be sent out.
861 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
862 * has already been assigned to this frame.
863 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
864 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
865 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
866 *
867 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
868 */
869 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
870 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
871 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
872 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
873 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
874 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
875 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5),
876 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6),
877 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7),
878 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8),
879 };
880
881 /*
882 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
883 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
884 */
885 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
886 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
887 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
888 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
889 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
890 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
891 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
892 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
893
894 /**
895 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
896 * Rate Control algorithm.
897 *
898 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
899 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
900 *
901 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
902 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
903 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
904 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
905 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
906 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
907 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
908 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
909 * Greenfield mode.
910 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
911 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
912 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
913 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
914 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
915 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
916 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
917 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
918 */
919 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
920 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
921 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
922 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
923
924 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
925 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
926 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
927 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
928 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
929 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
930 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
931 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
932 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
933 };
934
935
936 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
937 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
938
939 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
940 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
941
942 /* maximum number of rate stages */
943 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
944
945 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
946 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
947
948 /**
949 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
950 *
951 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
952 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
953 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
954 *
955 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
956 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
957 *
958 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
959 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
960 *
961 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
962 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
963 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
964 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
965 * information::
966 *
967 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
968 *
969 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
970 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
971 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
972 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
973 * information should then contain::
974 *
975 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
976 *
977 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
978 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
979 */
980 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
981 s8 idx;
982 u16 count:5,
983 flags:11;
984 } __packed;
985
986 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
987
ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate,u8 mcs,u8 nss)988 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
989 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
990 {
991 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
992 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
993 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
994 }
995
996 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)997 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
998 {
999 return rate->idx & 0xF;
1000 }
1001
1002 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)1003 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1004 {
1005 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1006 }
1007
1008 /**
1009 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1010 *
1011 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1012 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1013 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1014 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1015 *
1016 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1017 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
1018 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1019 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1020 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1021 * @control: union part for control data
1022 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1023 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1024 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1025 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1026 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1027 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1028 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1029 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1030 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1031 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1032 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1033 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1034 * @pad: padding
1035 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1036 * @status: union part for status data
1037 * @status.rates: attempted rates
1038 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1039 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1040 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1041 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1042 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1043 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1044 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1045 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1046 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1047 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1048 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1049 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1050 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1051 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1052 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1053 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1054 */
1055 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1056 /* common information */
1057 u32 flags;
1058 u32 band:3,
1059 ack_frame_id:13,
1060 hw_queue:4,
1061 tx_time_est:10;
1062 /* 2 free bits */
1063
1064 union {
1065 struct {
1066 union {
1067 /* rate control */
1068 struct {
1069 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1070 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1071 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1072 u8 use_rts:1;
1073 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1074 u8 short_preamble:1;
1075 u8 skip_table:1;
1076 /* 2 bytes free */
1077 };
1078 /* only needed before rate control */
1079 unsigned long jiffies;
1080 };
1081 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1082 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1083 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1084 u32 flags;
1085 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1086 } control;
1087 struct {
1088 u64 cookie;
1089 } ack;
1090 struct {
1091 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1092 s32 ack_signal;
1093 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1094 u8 ampdu_len;
1095 u8 antenna;
1096 u16 tx_time;
1097 bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1098 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1099 } status;
1100 struct {
1101 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1102 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1103 u8 pad[4];
1104
1105 void *rate_driver_data[
1106 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1107 };
1108
1109 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1110
1111 void *driver_data[
1112 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1113 };
1114 };
1115
1116 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info,u16 tx_time_est)1117 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1118 {
1119 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1120 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1121 */
1122 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1123 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1124 }
1125
1126 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1127 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1128 {
1129 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1130 }
1131
1132 /**
1133 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1134 *
1135 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1136 * @info: Basic tx status information
1137 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1138 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1139 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1140 */
1141 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1142 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1143 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1144 struct sk_buff *skb;
1145 struct rate_info *rate;
1146 struct list_head *free_list;
1147 };
1148
1149 /**
1150 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1151 *
1152 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1153 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1154 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1155 *
1156 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1157 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1158 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1159 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1160 */
1161 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1162 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1163 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1164 const u8 *common_ies;
1165 size_t common_ie_len;
1166 };
1167
1168
IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff * skb)1169 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1170 {
1171 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1172 }
1173
IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff * skb)1174 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1175 {
1176 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1177 }
1178
1179 /**
1180 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1181 *
1182 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1183 *
1184 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1185 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1186 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1187 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1188 *
1189 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1190 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1191 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1192 */
1193 static inline void
ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1194 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1195 {
1196 int i;
1197
1198 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1199 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1200 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1201 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1202 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1203 /* clear the rate counts */
1204 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1205 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1206
1207 BUILD_BUG_ON(
1208 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1209 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1210 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1211 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1212 }
1213
1214
1215 /**
1216 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1217 *
1218 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1219 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1220 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1221 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1222 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1223 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1224 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1225 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1226 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1227 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1228 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1229 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1230 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1231 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1232 * de-duplication by itself.
1233 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1234 * the frame.
1235 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1236 * the frame.
1237 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1238 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1239 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1240 * merging.
1241 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1242 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1243 * (including FCS) was received.
1244 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1245 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1246 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1247 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1248 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1249 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1250 * each A-MPDU
1251 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1252 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1253 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1254 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1255 * on this subframe
1256 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1257 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1258 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1259 * done by the hardware
1260 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1261 * processing it in any regular way.
1262 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1263 * them for sniffing purposes.
1264 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1265 * monitor interfaces.
1266 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1267 * them for sniffing purposes.
1268 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1269 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1270 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1271 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1272 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1273 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1274 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1275 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1276 * interleaved with other frames.
1277 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1278 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1279 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1280 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1281 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1282 * the first subframe.
1283 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1284 * be done in the hardware.
1285 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1286 * frame
1287 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1288 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1289 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1290 *
1291 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1292 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1293 * - DATA3_CODING
1294 * - DATA5_GI
1295 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1296 * - DATA6_NSTS
1297 * - DATA3_STBC
1298 *
1299 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1300 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1301 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1302 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1303 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1304 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is
1305 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't
1306 * known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1307 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1308 * hardware or driver)
1309 */
1310 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1311 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1312 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1313 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
1314 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1315 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1316 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1317 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
1318 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
1319 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1320 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1321 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1322 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1323 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1324 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1325 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1326 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1327 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1328 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1329 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1330 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1331 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1332 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1333 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1334 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
1335 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1336 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
1337 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1338 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
1339 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28),
1340 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29),
1341 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30),
1342 };
1343
1344 /**
1345 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1346 *
1347 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1348 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1349 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1350 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1351 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1352 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1353 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1354 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1355 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1356 */
1357 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1358 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
1359 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1360 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1361 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1362 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1363 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
1364 };
1365
1366 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1367
1368 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1369 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1370 RX_ENC_HT,
1371 RX_ENC_VHT,
1372 RX_ENC_HE,
1373 };
1374
1375 /**
1376 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1377 *
1378 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1379 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1380 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1381 *
1382 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1383 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1384 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1385 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1386 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1387 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1388 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1389 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1390 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1391 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1392 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1393 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1394 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1395 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1396 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1397 * values were filled.
1398 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1399 * support dB or unspecified units)
1400 * @antenna: antenna used
1401 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1402 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1403 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1404 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1405 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1406 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1407 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1408 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1409 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1410 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1411 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1412 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1413 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1414 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1415 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1416 */
1417 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1418 u64 mactime;
1419 u64 boottime_ns;
1420 u32 device_timestamp;
1421 u32 ampdu_reference;
1422 u32 flag;
1423 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1424 u8 enc_flags;
1425 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1426 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1427 u8 rate_idx;
1428 u8 nss;
1429 u8 rx_flags;
1430 u8 band;
1431 u8 antenna;
1432 s8 signal;
1433 u8 chains;
1434 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1435 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1436 u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1437 };
1438
1439 static inline u32
ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status * rx_status)1440 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1441 {
1442 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1443 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1444 }
1445
1446 /**
1447 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1448 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1449 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1450 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1451 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1452 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1453 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1454 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1455 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1456 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1457 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1458 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1459 * @data field.
1460 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1461 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1462 * length
1463 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1464 *
1465 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1466 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1467 * data.
1468 */
1469 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1470 u32 present;
1471 u8 align;
1472 u8 oui[3];
1473 u8 subns;
1474 u8 pad;
1475 u16 len;
1476 u8 data[];
1477 } __packed;
1478
1479 /**
1480 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1481 *
1482 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1483 *
1484 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1485 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1486 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1487 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1488 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1489 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1490 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1491 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1492 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1493 * for more.
1494 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1495 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1496 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1497 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1498 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1499 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1500 * operating channel.
1501 */
1502 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1503 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
1504 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
1505 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
1506 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
1507 };
1508
1509
1510 /**
1511 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1512 *
1513 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1514 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1515 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1516 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1517 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1518 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1519 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1520 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1521 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1522 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1523 */
1524 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1525 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
1526 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
1527 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
1528 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
1529 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1530 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1531 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
1532 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
1533 };
1534
1535 /**
1536 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1537 *
1538 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1539 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1540 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1541 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1542 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1543 */
1544 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1545 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1546 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1547 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1548 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1549
1550 /* keep last */
1551 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1552 };
1553
1554 /**
1555 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1556 *
1557 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1558 *
1559 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1560 *
1561 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1562 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1563 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1564 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1565 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1566 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1567 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1568 *
1569 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1570 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1571 *
1572 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1573 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1574 *
1575 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1576 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1577 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1578 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1579 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1580 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1581 *
1582 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1583 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1584 * configured for an HT channel.
1585 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1586 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1587 */
1588 struct ieee80211_conf {
1589 u32 flags;
1590 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1591
1592 u16 listen_interval;
1593 u8 ps_dtim_period;
1594
1595 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1596
1597 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1598 bool radar_enabled;
1599 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1600
1601 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1602 };
1603
1604 /**
1605 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1606 *
1607 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1608 * operation.
1609 *
1610 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1611 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1612 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1613 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1614 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1615 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1616 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1617 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1618 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1619 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1620 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1621 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1622 * channel, expressed in TU.
1623 */
1624 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1625 u64 timestamp;
1626 u32 device_timestamp;
1627 bool block_tx;
1628 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1629 u8 count;
1630 u32 delay;
1631 };
1632
1633 /**
1634 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1635 *
1636 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1637 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1638 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1639 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1640 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1641 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1642 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1643 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1644 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1645 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1646 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1647 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1648 * this is not pure P2P vif.
1649 */
1650 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1651 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1652 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1653 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
1654 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
1655 };
1656
1657
1658 /**
1659 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1660 *
1661 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1662 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1663 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1664 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1665 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1666 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1667 * mac80211.
1668 */
1669
1670 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1671 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0),
1672 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1),
1673 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2),
1674 };
1675
1676 /**
1677 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1678 *
1679 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1680 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1681 *
1682 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1683 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1684 * or the BSS we're associated to
1685 * @addr: address of this interface
1686 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1687 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1688 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1689 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1690 * for read access.
1691 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1692 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1693 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1694 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1695 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1696 * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1697 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1698 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1699 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1700 * restrictions.
1701 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1702 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1703 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1704 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1705 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1706 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1707 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1708 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1709 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1710 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1711 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1712 * interface.
1713 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1714 * for this interface.
1715 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1716 * sizeof(void \*).
1717 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1718 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1719 * protected by fq->lock.
1720 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1721 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1722 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is
1723 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1724 * for read access.
1725 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change.
1726 */
1727 struct ieee80211_vif {
1728 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1729 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1730 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1731 bool p2p;
1732 bool csa_active;
1733 bool mu_mimo_owner;
1734
1735 u8 cab_queue;
1736 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1737
1738 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1739
1740 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1741
1742 u32 driver_flags;
1743 u32 offload_flags;
1744
1745 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1746 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1747 #endif
1748
1749 bool probe_req_reg;
1750 bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1751
1752 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1753
1754 bool color_change_active;
1755 u8 color_change_color;
1756
1757 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1758
1759 /* must be last */
1760 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1761 };
1762
ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1763 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1764 {
1765 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1766 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1767 #endif
1768 return false;
1769 }
1770
1771 /**
1772 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1773 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1774 *
1775 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1776 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1777 *
1778 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1779 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1780 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1781 */
1782 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1783
1784 /**
1785 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1786 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1787 *
1788 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1789 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1790 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
1791 */
1792 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1793
1794 /**
1795 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1796 *
1797 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1798 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1799 *
1800 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1801 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1802 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1803 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1804 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1805 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1806 * generation in software.
1807 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1808 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1809 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1810 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1811 * (MFP) to be done in software.
1812 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1813 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1814 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1815 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1816 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1817 * MIC.
1818 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1819 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1820 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1821 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1822 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1823 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1824 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1825 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1826 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1827 * only for management frames (MFP).
1828 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1829 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1830 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1831 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1832 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1833 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1834 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1835 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1836 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1837 * generation only
1838 */
1839 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1840 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1841 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1842 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1843 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1844 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1845 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1846 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
1847 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
1848 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
1849 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9),
1850 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10),
1851 };
1852
1853 /**
1854 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1855 *
1856 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1857 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1858 *
1859 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1860 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1861 * encrypted in hardware.
1862 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1863 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1864 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1865 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1866 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1867 * @keylen: key material length
1868 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1869 * data block:
1870 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1871 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1872 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1873 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1874 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1875 */
1876 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1877 atomic64_t tx_pn;
1878 u32 cipher;
1879 u8 icv_len;
1880 u8 iv_len;
1881 u8 hw_key_idx;
1882 s8 keyidx;
1883 u16 flags;
1884 u8 keylen;
1885 u8 key[];
1886 };
1887
1888 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1889
1890 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1891 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1892
1893 /**
1894 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1895 *
1896 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1897 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1898 * reverse order than in packet)
1899 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1900 * reverse order than in packet)
1901 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1902 * reverse order than in packet)
1903 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1904 * reverse order than in packet)
1905 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1906 */
1907 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1908 union {
1909 struct {
1910 u32 iv32;
1911 u16 iv16;
1912 } tkip;
1913 struct {
1914 u8 pn[6];
1915 } ccmp;
1916 struct {
1917 u8 pn[6];
1918 } aes_cmac;
1919 struct {
1920 u8 pn[6];
1921 } aes_gmac;
1922 struct {
1923 u8 pn[6];
1924 } gcmp;
1925 struct {
1926 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1927 u8 seq_len;
1928 } hw;
1929 };
1930 };
1931
1932 /**
1933 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1934 *
1935 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1936 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1937 *
1938 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1939 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1940 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1941 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1942 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1943 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1944 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1945 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1946 * key_idx value calculation:
1947 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1948 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1949 */
1950 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1951 u32 cipher;
1952 u16 iftype;
1953 u8 hdr_len;
1954 u8 pn_len;
1955 u8 pn_off;
1956 u8 key_idx_off;
1957 u8 key_idx_mask;
1958 u8 key_idx_shift;
1959 u8 mic_len;
1960 };
1961
1962 /**
1963 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1964 *
1965 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1966 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1967 *
1968 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1969 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1970 */
1971 enum set_key_cmd {
1972 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1973 };
1974
1975 /**
1976 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1977 *
1978 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1979 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1980 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1981 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1982 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1983 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1984 */
1985 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1986 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1987 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1988 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1989 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1990 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1991 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1992 };
1993
1994 /**
1995 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1996 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1997 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1998 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1999 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
2000 * (including 80+80 MHz)
2001 *
2002 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
2003 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
2004 */
2005 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
2006 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
2007 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
2008 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
2009 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
2010 };
2011
2012 /**
2013 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
2014 *
2015 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2016 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2017 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2018 */
2019 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2020 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2021 struct {
2022 s8 idx;
2023 u8 count;
2024 u8 count_cts;
2025 u8 count_rts;
2026 u16 flags;
2027 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2028 };
2029
2030 /**
2031 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2032 *
2033 * Used to configure txpower for station.
2034 *
2035 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2036 * to the STA.
2037 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2038 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2039 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2040 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2041 * per peer TPC.
2042 */
2043 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2044 s16 power;
2045 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2046 };
2047
2048 #define MAX_STA_LINKS 15
2049
2050 /**
2051 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info
2052 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single)
2053 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here.
2054 *
2055 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr
2056 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different
2057 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr)
2058 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates
2059 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2060 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2061 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2062 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2063 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA
2064 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2065 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2066 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2067 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2068 * the station moves to associated state.
2069 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2070 *
2071 */
2072 struct ieee80211_link_sta {
2073 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2074
2075 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2076 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2077 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2078 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2079 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2080 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap;
2081
2082 u8 rx_nss;
2083 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2084 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2085 };
2086
2087 /**
2088 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2089 *
2090 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2091 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2092 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2093 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2094 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2095 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2096 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association
2097 * and holds pointers to various link STA's
2098 *
2099 * @addr: MAC address
2100 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2101 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2102 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2103 * Can be modified by driver.
2104 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2105 * otherwise always false)
2106 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2107 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2108 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2109 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2110 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2111 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2112 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2113 * @rates: rate control selection table
2114 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2115 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2116 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2117 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2118 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2119 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2120 * unlimited.
2121 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2122 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2123 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2124 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2125 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2126 * @multi_link_sta: Identifies if this sta is a MLD STA
2127 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link
2128 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through
2129 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA
2130 * the first added link STA will point to deflink.
2131 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link,
2132 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and
2133 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO
2134 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to
2135 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address
2136 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned
2137 * by the AP.
2138 */
2139 struct ieee80211_sta {
2140 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2141 u16 aid;
2142 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2143 bool wme;
2144 u8 uapsd_queues;
2145 u8 max_sp;
2146 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2147 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2148 bool tdls;
2149 bool tdls_initiator;
2150 bool mfp;
2151 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2152
2153 /**
2154 * @max_amsdu_len:
2155 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2156 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2157 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2158 *
2159 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2160 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2161 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2162 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2163 *
2164 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2165 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2166 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2167 */
2168 u16 max_amsdu_len;
2169 bool support_p2p_ps;
2170 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2171 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2172
2173 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2174
2175 bool multi_link_sta;
2176 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink;
2177 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link[MAX_STA_LINKS];
2178
2179 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
2180
2181 /* must be last */
2182 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2183 };
2184
2185 /**
2186 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2187 *
2188 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2189 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2190 *
2191 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2192 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2193 */
2194 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2195 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2196 };
2197
2198 /**
2199 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2200 *
2201 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2202 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2203 */
2204 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2205 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2206 };
2207
2208 /**
2209 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2210 *
2211 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2212 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2213 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2214 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2215 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2216 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2217 *
2218 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2219 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2220 */
2221 struct ieee80211_txq {
2222 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2223 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2224 u8 tid;
2225 u8 ac;
2226
2227 /* must be last */
2228 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2229 };
2230
2231 /**
2232 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2233 *
2234 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2235 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2236 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2237 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2238 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2239 *
2240 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2241 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2242 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2243 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2244 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2245 * algorithm.
2246 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2247 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2248 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2249 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2250 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2251 * CCK frames.
2252 *
2253 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2254 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2255 * the FCS at the end.
2256 *
2257 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2258 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2259 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2260 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2261 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2262 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2263 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2264 *
2265 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2266 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2267 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2268 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2269 *
2270 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2271 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2272 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2273 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2274 *
2275 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2276 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2277 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2278 *
2279 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2280 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2281 *
2282 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2283 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2284 *
2285 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2286 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2287 * stack support for dynamic PS.
2288 *
2289 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2290 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2291 *
2292 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2293 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2294 *
2295 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2296 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2297 * the stack.
2298 *
2299 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2300 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2301 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2302 *
2303 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2304 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2305 * dtim_period).
2306 *
2307 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2308 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2309 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2310 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2311 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2312 * only in that case.
2313 *
2314 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2315 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2316 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2317 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2318 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2319 * the PS mode of connected stations.
2320 *
2321 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2322 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2323 * software.
2324 *
2325 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2326 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2327 * active interfaces.
2328 *
2329 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2330 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2331 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2332 *
2333 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2334 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2335 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2336 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2337 * supported cipher suites.
2338 *
2339 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2340 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2341 * for frames.
2342 *
2343 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2344 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2345 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2346 * control for more details.
2347 *
2348 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2349 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2350 *
2351 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2352 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2353 * is supported.
2354 *
2355 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2356 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2357 *
2358 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2359 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2360 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2361 *
2362 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2363 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2364 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2365 * CSA frame.
2366 *
2367 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2368 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2369 *
2370 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2371 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2372 *
2373 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2374 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2375 *
2376 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2377 * within A-MPDU.
2378 *
2379 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2380 * for sent beacons.
2381 *
2382 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2383 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2384 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2385 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2386 *
2387 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2388 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2389 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2390 * timeout.
2391 *
2392 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2393 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2394 *
2395 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2396 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2397 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2398 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2399 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2400 *
2401 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2402 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2403 *
2404 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2405 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2406 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2407 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2408 *
2409 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2410 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2411 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2412 *
2413 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2414 * TDLS links.
2415 *
2416 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2417 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2418 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2419 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2420 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2421 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2422 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2423 *
2424 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2425 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2426 *
2427 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2428 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2429 *
2430 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2431 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2432 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2433 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2434 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2435 *
2436 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2437 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2438 * TXQs to start with.
2439 *
2440 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2441 * length in tx status information
2442 *
2443 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2444 *
2445 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2446 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2447 *
2448 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2449 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2450 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2451 *
2452 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2453 * offload
2454 *
2455 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2456 * offload
2457 *
2458 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
2459 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
2460 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
2461 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
2462 * the stack.
2463 *
2464 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2465 */
2466 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2467 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2468 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2469 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2470 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2471 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2472 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2473 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2474 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2475 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2476 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2477 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2478 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2479 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2480 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2481 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2482 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2483 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2484 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2485 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2486 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2487 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2488 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2489 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2490 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2491 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2492 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2493 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2494 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2495 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2496 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2497 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2498 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2499 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2500 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2501 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2502 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2503 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2504 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2505 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2506 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2507 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2508 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2509 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2510 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2511 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2512 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2513 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2514 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2515 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2516 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2517 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2518 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
2519
2520 /* keep last, obviously */
2521 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2522 };
2523
2524 /**
2525 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2526 *
2527 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2528 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2529 *
2530 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2531 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2532 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2533 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2534 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2535 *
2536 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2537 *
2538 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2539 * along with this structure.
2540 *
2541 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2542 *
2543 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2544 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2545 *
2546 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2547 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2548 *
2549 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2550 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2551 *
2552 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2553 * that HW supports
2554 *
2555 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2556 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2557 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2558 *
2559 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2560 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2561 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2562 *
2563 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2564 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2565 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2566 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2567 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2568 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2569 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2570 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2571 *
2572 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2573 * can handle.
2574 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2575 * the hw can report back.
2576 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2577 *
2578 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2579 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2580 * aggregation.
2581 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2582 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2583 * it shouldn't be set.
2584 *
2585 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2586 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2587 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2588 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2589 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2590 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2591 *
2592 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2593 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2594 *
2595 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2596 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2597 *
2598 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2599 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2600 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2601 * adding _BW is supported today.
2602 *
2603 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2604 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2605 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2606 *
2607 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2608 *
2609 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2610 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2611 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2612 * device_timestamp.
2613 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2614 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2615 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2616 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2617 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2618 *
2619 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2620 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2621 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2622 *
2623 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2624 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2625 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2626 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2627 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2628 * neither enabled.
2629 *
2630 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2631 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2632 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2633 *
2634 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2635 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2636 * supported by HW.
2637 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2638 * device.
2639 *
2640 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2641 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2642 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2643 *
2644 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2645 * refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2646 *
2647 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2648 */
2649 struct ieee80211_hw {
2650 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2651 struct wiphy *wiphy;
2652 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2653 void *priv;
2654 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2655 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2656 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2657 int vif_data_size;
2658 int sta_data_size;
2659 int chanctx_data_size;
2660 int txq_data_size;
2661 u16 queues;
2662 u16 max_listen_interval;
2663 s8 max_signal;
2664 u8 max_rates;
2665 u8 max_report_rates;
2666 u8 max_rate_tries;
2667 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2668 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2669 u8 max_tx_fragments;
2670 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2671 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2672 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2673 struct {
2674 int units_pos;
2675 s16 accuracy;
2676 } radiotap_timestamp;
2677 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2678 u8 uapsd_queues;
2679 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2680 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2681 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2682 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2683 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2684 u8 weight_multiplier;
2685 u32 max_mtu;
2686
2687 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
2688 };
2689
_ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2690 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2691 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2692 {
2693 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2694 }
2695 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2696
_ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2697 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2698 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2699 {
2700 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2701 }
2702 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2703
2704 /**
2705 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2706 *
2707 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2708 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2709 */
2710 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2711 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2712
2713 /* Keep last */
2714 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2715 };
2716
2717 /**
2718 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2719 *
2720 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2721 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2722 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2723 * @status: channel-switch response status
2724 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2725 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2726 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2727 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2728 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2729 */
2730 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2731 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2732 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2733 u8 action_code;
2734 u32 status;
2735 u32 timestamp;
2736 u16 switch_time;
2737 u16 switch_timeout;
2738 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2739 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2740 };
2741
2742 /**
2743 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2744 *
2745 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2746 *
2747 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2748 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2749 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2750 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2751 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2752 *
2753 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2754 */
2755 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2756
2757 /**
2758 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2759 *
2760 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2761 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2762 */
SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct device * dev)2763 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2764 {
2765 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2766 }
2767
2768 /**
2769 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2770 *
2771 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2772 * @addr: the address to set
2773 */
SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const u8 * addr)2774 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2775 {
2776 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2777 }
2778
2779 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2780 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2781 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2782 {
2783 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2784 return NULL;
2785 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2786 }
2787
2788 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2789 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2790 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2791 {
2792 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2793 return NULL;
2794 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2795 }
2796
2797 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c,int idx)2798 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2799 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2800 {
2801 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2802 return NULL;
2803 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2804 }
2805
2806 /**
2807 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2808 * @hw: the hardware
2809 * @skb: the skb
2810 *
2811 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2812 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2813 */
2814 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2815
2816 /**
2817 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2818 *
2819 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2820 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2821 *
2822 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2823 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2824 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2825 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2826 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2827 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2828 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2829 *
2830 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2831 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2832 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2833 *
2834 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2835 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2836 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2837 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2838 *
2839 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2840 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2841 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2842 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2843 *
2844 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2845 *
2846 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2847 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2848 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2849 * based on the receive flags.
2850 *
2851 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2852 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2853 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2854 * keys.
2855 *
2856 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2857 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2858 * handler.
2859 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2860 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2861 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2862 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2863 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2864 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2865 *
2866 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2867 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2868 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2869 *
2870 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2871 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
2872 * requirements:
2873 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211
2874 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed,
2875 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2876 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2877 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2878 encrypted with the new key when also needing
2879 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and
2880 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2881 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2882 */
2883
2884 /**
2885 * DOC: Powersave support
2886 *
2887 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2888 *
2889 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2890 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2891 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2892 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2893 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2894 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2895 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2896 * it finds traffic directed to it.
2897 *
2898 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2899 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2900 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2901 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2902 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2903 *
2904 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2905 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2906 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2907 *
2908 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2909 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2910 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2911 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2912 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2913 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2914 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2915 *
2916 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2917 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2918 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2919 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2920 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2921 * periods.
2922 *
2923 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2924 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2925 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2926 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2927 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2928 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2929 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2930 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2931 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2932 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2933 *
2934 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2935 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2936 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2937 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2938 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2939 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2940 *
2941 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2942 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2943 */
2944
2945 /**
2946 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2947 *
2948 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2949 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2950 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2951 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2952 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2953 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2954 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2955 *
2956 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2957 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2958 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2959 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2960 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2961 *
2962 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2963 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2964 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2965 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2966 *
2967 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2968 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2969 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2970 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2971 *
2972 * - a list of information element IDs
2973 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2974 *
2975 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2976 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2977 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2978 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2979 * vendor information elements.
2980 *
2981 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2982 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2983 *
2984 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2985 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2986 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2987 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2988 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2989 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2990 *
2991 *
2992 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2993 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2994 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2995 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2996 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2997 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2998 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2999 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
3000 *
3001 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
3002 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
3003 * signal strength threshold checking.
3004 */
3005
3006 /**
3007 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
3008 *
3009 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
3010 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
3011 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
3012 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
3013 *
3014 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
3015 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
3016 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
3017 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
3018 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
3019 * hardware flags.
3020 *
3021 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
3022 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
3023 * turned off otherwise.
3024 *
3025 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
3026 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
3027 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
3028 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
3029 */
3030
3031 /**
3032 * DOC: Frame filtering
3033 *
3034 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
3035 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
3036 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
3037 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
3038 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
3039 *
3040 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
3041 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
3042 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
3043 *
3044 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
3045 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
3046 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
3047 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
3048 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
3049 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
3050 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
3051 *
3052 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
3053 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
3054 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
3055 * or dropped.
3056 *
3057 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
3058 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
3059 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
3060 * the flag, but not clear it.
3061 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
3062 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
3063 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
3064 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3065 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3066 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3067 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3068 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3069 */
3070
3071 /**
3072 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3073 *
3074 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3075 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3076 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3077 *
3078 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3079 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3080 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3081 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3082 * the driver code.
3083 *
3084 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3085 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3086 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3087 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3088 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3089 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3090 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3091 *
3092 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3093 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3094 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3095 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3096 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3097 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3098 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3099 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3100 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3101 * @sta_notify callback.
3102 *
3103 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3104 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3105 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3106 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3107 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3108 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3109 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3110 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3111 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3112 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3113 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3114 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3115 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3116 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3117 *
3118 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3119 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3120 *
3121 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3122 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3123 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3124 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3125 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3126 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3127 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3128 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3129 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3130 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3131 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3132 *
3133 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3134 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3135 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3136 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3137 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3138 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3139 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3140 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3141 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3142 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3143 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3144 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3145 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3146 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3147 *
3148 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3149 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3150 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3151 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3152 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3153 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3154 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3155 *
3156 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3157 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3158 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3159 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3160 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3161 *
3162 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3163 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3164 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3165 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3166 */
3167
3168 /**
3169 * DOC: HW queue control
3170 *
3171 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3172 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3173 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3174 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3175 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3176 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3177 *
3178 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3179 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3180 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3181 *
3182 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3183 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3184 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3185 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3186 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3187 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3188 * the hardware queue.
3189 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3190 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3191 *
3192 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3193 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3194 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3195 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3196 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3197 *
3198 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3199 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3200 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
3201 * off-channel queue: 9
3202 *
3203 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3204 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3205 *
3206 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3207 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3208 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3209 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3210 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3211 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3212 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3213 *
3214 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3215 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3216 *
3217 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3218 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3219 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3220 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3221 */
3222
3223 /**
3224 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3225 *
3226 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3227 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3228 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3229 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3230 *
3231 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3232 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3233 * multicast address.
3234 *
3235 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3236 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3237 *
3238 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3239 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3240 *
3241 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3242 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3243 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3244 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3245 * honour this flag if possible.
3246 *
3247 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3248 * station
3249 *
3250 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3251 *
3252 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3253 *
3254 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3255 *
3256 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3257 */
3258 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3259 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
3260 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
3261 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
3262 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3263 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
3264 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
3265 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
3266 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
3267 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9,
3268 };
3269
3270 /**
3271 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3272 *
3273 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3274 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3275 *
3276 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3277 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3278 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3279 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3280 *
3281 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3282 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3283 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3284 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3285 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3286 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3287 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3288 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3289 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3290 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3291 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3292 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3293 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3294 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3295 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3296 * session is gone and removes the station.
3297 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3298 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3299 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3300 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3301 */
3302 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3303 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3304 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3305 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3306 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3307 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3308 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3309 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3310 };
3311
3312 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3313 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3314
3315 /**
3316 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3317 *
3318 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3319 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3320 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3321 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3322 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3323 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3324 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3325 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3326 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3327 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3328 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3329 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3330 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3331 */
3332 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3333 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3334 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3335 u16 tid;
3336 u16 ssn;
3337 u16 buf_size;
3338 bool amsdu;
3339 u16 timeout;
3340 };
3341
3342 /**
3343 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3344 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3345 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3346 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3347 */
3348 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3349 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3350 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3351 };
3352
3353 /**
3354 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3355 *
3356 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3357 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3358 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3359 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3360 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3361 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3362 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3363 * the peer.
3364 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3365 * by the peer
3366 */
3367 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3368 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3369 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
3370 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3371 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
3372 };
3373
3374 /**
3375 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3376 *
3377 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3378 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3379 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3380 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3381 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3382 *
3383 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3384 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3385 * for sending management frames offchannel.
3386 */
3387 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3388 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3389 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3390 };
3391
3392 /**
3393 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3394 *
3395 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3396 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3397 *
3398 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3399 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3400 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3401 * of wowlan configuration)
3402 */
3403 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3404 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3405 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3406 };
3407
3408 /**
3409 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information
3410 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration,
3411 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3412 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc)
3413 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only
3414 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only
3415 * valid for auth and (re)assoc.
3416 */
3417 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info {
3418 u16 duration;
3419 u16 subtype;
3420 u8 success:1;
3421 };
3422
3423 /**
3424 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3425 *
3426 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3427 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3428 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3429 *
3430 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3431 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3432 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3433 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3434 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3435 * Must be atomic.
3436 *
3437 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3438 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3439 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3440 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3441 * or zero.
3442 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3443 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3444 * is added.
3445 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3446 *
3447 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3448 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3449 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3450 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3451 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3452 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3453 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3454 *
3455 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3456 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3457 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3458 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3459 * reconfigured at resume time.
3460 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3461 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3462 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3463 * must return 1 from this function.
3464 *
3465 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3466 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3467 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3468 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3469 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3470 *
3471 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3472 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3473 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3474 * in suspend().
3475 *
3476 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3477 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3478 * and @stop must be implemented.
3479 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3480 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3481 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3482 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3483 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3484 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3485 *
3486 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3487 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3488 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3489 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3490 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3491 *
3492 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3493 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3494 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3495 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3496 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3497 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3498 * MAC address of the device going away.
3499 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3500 *
3501 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3502 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3503 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3504 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
3505 *
3506 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3507 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3508 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3509 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3510 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3511 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3512 * can sleep.
3513 *
3514 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3515 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3516 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3517 *
3518 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3519 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3520 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3521 *
3522 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3523 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3524 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3525 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3526 * which flags are changed.
3527 * This callback can sleep.
3528 *
3529 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3530 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3531 *
3532 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3533 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3534 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3535 * is enabled.
3536 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3537 * The callback can sleep.
3538 *
3539 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3540 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3541 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3542 * The callback must be atomic.
3543 *
3544 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3545 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3546 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3547 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3548 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3549 *
3550 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3551 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3552 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3553 *
3554 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3555 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3556 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3557 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3558 * that power save is disabled.
3559 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3560 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3561 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3562 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3563 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3564 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3565 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3566 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3567 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3568 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3569 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3570 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3571 * The callback can sleep.
3572 *
3573 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3574 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3575 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3576 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3577 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3578 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3579 * The callback can sleep.
3580 *
3581 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3582 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3583 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3584 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3585 *
3586 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3587 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3588 *
3589 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3590 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3591 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3592 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3593 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3594 *
3595 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3596 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3597 * this notification.
3598 * The callback can sleep.
3599 *
3600 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3601 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
3602 * The callback can sleep.
3603 *
3604 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3605 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3606 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3607 * The callback must be atomic.
3608 *
3609 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3610 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3611 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3612 * should be set as well.
3613 * The callback can sleep.
3614 *
3615 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3616 * The callback can sleep.
3617 *
3618 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3619 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3620 *
3621 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3622 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3623 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3624 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3625 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3626 * This callback can sleep.
3627 *
3628 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3629 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3630 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3631 * callback can sleep.
3632 *
3633 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3634 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3635 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3636 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3637 *
3638 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3639 * power for the station.
3640 * This callback can sleep.
3641 *
3642 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3643 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3644 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3645 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3646 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3647 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3648 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3649 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3650 * The callback can sleep.
3651 *
3652 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3653 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3654 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3655 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3656 * in @sta_state.
3657 * The callback can sleep.
3658 *
3659 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3660 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3661 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3662 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3663 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3664 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3665 * Must be atomic.
3666 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3667 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3668 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3669 *
3670 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3671 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3672 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3673 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3674 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3675 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3676 * The callback can sleep.
3677 *
3678 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3679 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3680 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3681 * The callback can sleep.
3682 *
3683 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3684 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3685 * required function.
3686 * The callback can sleep.
3687 *
3688 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3689 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3690 * required function.
3691 * The callback can sleep.
3692 *
3693 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3694 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3695 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3696 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3697 * The callback can sleep.
3698 *
3699 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3700 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3701 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3702 * TSF synchronization.
3703 * The callback can sleep.
3704 *
3705 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3706 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3707 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3708 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3709 * The callback can sleep.
3710 *
3711 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3712 *
3713 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3714 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3715 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3716 * The callback can sleep.
3717 *
3718 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3719 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3720 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3721 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3722 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3723 *
3724 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3725 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3726 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3727 *
3728 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3729 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3730 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3731 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3732 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3733 * Note that vif can be NULL.
3734 * The callback can sleep.
3735 *
3736 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3737 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3738 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3739 * completion of the channel switch.
3740 *
3741 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3742 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3743 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3744 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3745 *
3746 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3747 *
3748 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3749 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3750 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3751 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3752 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3753 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3754 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3755 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3756 * must be accepted in this case.
3757 * This callback may sleep.
3758 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3759 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3760 *
3761 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3762 *
3763 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3764 *
3765 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3766 * queues before entering power save.
3767 *
3768 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3769 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3770 * The callback can sleep.
3771 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3772 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3773 * The callback must be atomic.
3774 *
3775 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3776 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3777 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3778 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3779 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3780 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3781 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3782 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3783 * more-data bit must always be set.
3784 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3785 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3786 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3787 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3788 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3789 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3790 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3791 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3792 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3793 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3794 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3795 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3796 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3797 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3798 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3799 * This callback must be atomic.
3800 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3801 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3802 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3803 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3804 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3805 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3806 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3807 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3808 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3809 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3810 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3811 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3812 * This callback must be atomic.
3813 *
3814 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3815 *
3816 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3817 *
3818 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3819 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3820 *
3821 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3822 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3823 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3824 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3825 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3826 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3827 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3828 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3829 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3830 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3831 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3832 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3833 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3834 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3835 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info
3836 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the
3837 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested.
3838 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3839 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously
3840 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data
3841 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used.
3842 *
3843 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3844 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3845 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3846 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3847 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3848 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3849 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3850 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3851 *
3852 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3853 * This callback may sleep.
3854 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3855 * This callback may sleep.
3856 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3857 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3858 * channel context with different settings
3859 * This callback may sleep.
3860 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3861 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3862 * This callback may sleep.
3863 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3864 * unbound from vif.
3865 * This callback may sleep.
3866 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3867 * another, as specified in the list of
3868 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3869 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3870 * This callback may sleep.
3871 *
3872 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3873 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3874 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3875 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3876 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3877 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3878 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3879 *
3880 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3881 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3882 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3883 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3884 * This callback may sleep.
3885 *
3886 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3887 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3888 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3889 *
3890 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3891 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3892 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3893 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3894 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3895 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3896 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3897 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3898 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3899 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3900 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3901 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3902 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3903 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3904 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3905 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3906 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3907 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3908 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3909 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3910 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3911 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3912 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3913 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3914 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3915 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3916 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3917 *
3918 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3919 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3920 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3921 *
3922 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3923 * and hardware limits.
3924 *
3925 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3926 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3927 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3928 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3929 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3930 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3931 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3932 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3933 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3934 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3935 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3936 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3937 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3938 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3939 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3940 * the function call.
3941 *
3942 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3943 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3944 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3945 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3946 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3947 *
3948 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3949 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3950 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3951 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3952 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3953 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3954 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3955 * changed parameters.
3956 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3957 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3958 * this call.
3959 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3960 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3961 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3962 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3963 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3964 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3965 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3966 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3967 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3968 *
3969 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3970 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3971 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3972 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3973 * This callback may sleep.
3974 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
3975 * This callback may sleep.
3976 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
3977 * 4-address mode
3978 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
3979 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
3980 * to use rx decapsulation offload
3981 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer.
3982 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters
3983 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement.
3984 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of
3985 * twt structure.
3986 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received
3987 * from the peer.
3988 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for
3989 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit
3990 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev.
3991 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime
3992 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected
3993 * radar channel.
3994 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to
3995 * disable background CAC/radar detection.
3996 */
3997 struct ieee80211_ops {
3998 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3999 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
4000 struct sk_buff *skb);
4001 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4002 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4003 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
4004 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
4005 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4006 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
4007 #endif
4008 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4009 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4010 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4011 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4012 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
4013 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4014 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4015 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
4016 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4017 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4018 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4019 u32 changed);
4020
4021 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4022 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4023
4024 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4025 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
4026 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4027 unsigned int changed_flags,
4028 unsigned int *total_flags,
4029 u64 multicast);
4030 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4031 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4032 unsigned int filter_flags,
4033 unsigned int changed_flags);
4034 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4035 bool set);
4036 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
4037 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4038 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
4039 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4040 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4041 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
4042 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4043 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
4044 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4045 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4046 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
4047 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4048 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
4049 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4050 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
4051 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4052 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4053 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4054 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4055 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
4056 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
4057 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4058 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4059 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4060 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4061 const u8 *mac_addr);
4062 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4063 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4064 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4065 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
4066 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4067 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4068 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4069 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4070 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4071 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4072 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4073 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4074 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4075 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
4076 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4077 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4078 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4079 struct dentry *dir);
4080 #endif
4081 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4082 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4083 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4084 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4085 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4086 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4087 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4088 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
4089 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
4090 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4091 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4092 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4093 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4094 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4095 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4096 u32 changed);
4097 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4098 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4099 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4100 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4101 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4102 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4103 struct station_info *sinfo);
4104 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4105 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
4106 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4107 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4108 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4109 u64 tsf);
4110 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4111 s64 offset);
4112 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4113 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4114
4115 /**
4116 * @ampdu_action:
4117 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4118 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4119 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4120 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4121 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4122 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4123 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4124 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4125 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4126 *
4127 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4128 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4129 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
4130 *
4131 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4132 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4133 *
4134 * - ``TX: 1 or``
4135 * - ``TX: 18 or``
4136 * - ``TX: 81``
4137 *
4138 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4139 *
4140 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4141 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4142 * if the session can start immediately.
4143 *
4144 * The callback can sleep.
4145 */
4146 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4147 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4148 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4149 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4150 struct survey_info *survey);
4151 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4152 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4153 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4154 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4155 void *data, int len);
4156 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4157 struct netlink_callback *cb,
4158 void *data, int len);
4159 #endif
4160 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4161 u32 queues, bool drop);
4162 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4163 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4164 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4165 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4166 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4167
4168 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4169 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4170 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4171 int duration,
4172 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4173 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4174 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4175 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4176 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4177 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4178 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4179 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4180 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4181 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4182 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4183 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4184
4185 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4186 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4187 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4188 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4189 bool more_data);
4190 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4191 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4192 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4193 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4194 bool more_data);
4195
4196 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4197 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4198 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4199 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4200 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4201 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4202 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4203 u32 sset, u8 *data);
4204
4205 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4206 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4207 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4208 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4209 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4210 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4211
4212 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4213 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4214
4215 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4216 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4217 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4218 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4219 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4220 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4221 u32 changed);
4222 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4223 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4224 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4225 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4226 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4227 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4228 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4229 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4230 int n_vifs,
4231 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4232
4233 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4234 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4235
4236 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4237 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4238 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4239 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4240 #endif
4241 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4242 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4243 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4244 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4245 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4246 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4247
4248 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4249 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4250 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4251 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4252 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4253 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4254 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4255
4256 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4257 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4258 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4259 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4260 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4261 int *dbm);
4262
4263 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4264 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4265 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4266 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4267 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4268 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4269 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4270 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4271 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4272 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4273 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4274
4275 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4276 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4277 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4278
4279 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4280 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4281 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4282 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4283 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4284 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4285 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4286 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4287 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4288 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4289 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4290 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4291 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4292 u8 instance_id);
4293 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4294 struct sk_buff *head,
4295 struct sk_buff *skb);
4296 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4297 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4298 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4299 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4300 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4301 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4302 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4303 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4304 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4305 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4306 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4307 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4308 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4309 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4310 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4311 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4312 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4313 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4314 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4315 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4316 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4317 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4318 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4319 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4320 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4321 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt);
4322 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4323 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid);
4324 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4325 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4326
4327 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
4328 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(2);
4329 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(3);
4330 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(4);
4331 };
4332
4333 /**
4334 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4335 *
4336 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4337 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4338 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4339 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4340 * @priv_data_len.
4341 *
4342 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4343 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4344 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4345 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4346 *
4347 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4348 */
4349 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4350 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4351 const char *requested_name);
4352
4353 /**
4354 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4355 *
4356 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4357 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4358 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4359 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4360 * @priv_data_len.
4361 *
4362 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4363 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4364 *
4365 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4366 */
4367 static inline
ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,const struct ieee80211_ops * ops)4368 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4369 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4370 {
4371 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4372 }
4373
4374 /**
4375 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4376 *
4377 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4378 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4379 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4380 *
4381 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4382 *
4383 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4384 */
4385 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4386
4387 /**
4388 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4389 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4390 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4391 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4392 */
4393 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4394 int throughput;
4395 int blink_time;
4396 };
4397
4398 /**
4399 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4400 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4401 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4402 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4403 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4404 */
4405 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4406 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
4407 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
4408 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
4409 };
4410
4411 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4412 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4413 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4414 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4415 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4416 const char *
4417 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4418 unsigned int flags,
4419 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4420 unsigned int blink_table_len);
4421 #endif
4422 /**
4423 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4424 *
4425 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4426 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4427 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4428 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4429 *
4430 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4431 *
4432 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4433 */
ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4434 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4435 {
4436 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4437 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4438 #else
4439 return NULL;
4440 #endif
4441 }
4442
4443 /**
4444 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4445 *
4446 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4447 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4448 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4449 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4450 *
4451 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4452 *
4453 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4454 */
ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4455 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4456 {
4457 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4458 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4459 #else
4460 return NULL;
4461 #endif
4462 }
4463
4464 /**
4465 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4466 *
4467 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4468 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4469 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4470 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4471 *
4472 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4473 *
4474 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4475 */
ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4476 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4477 {
4478 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4479 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4480 #else
4481 return NULL;
4482 #endif
4483 }
4484
4485 /**
4486 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4487 *
4488 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4489 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4490 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4491 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4492 *
4493 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4494 *
4495 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4496 */
ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4497 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4498 {
4499 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4500 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4501 #else
4502 return NULL;
4503 #endif
4504 }
4505
4506 /**
4507 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4508 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4509 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4510 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4511 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4512 *
4513 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4514 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4515 *
4516 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4517 */
4518 static inline const char *
ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,unsigned int flags,const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink * blink_table,unsigned int blink_table_len)4519 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4520 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4521 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4522 {
4523 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4524 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4525 blink_table_len);
4526 #else
4527 return NULL;
4528 #endif
4529 }
4530
4531 /**
4532 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4533 *
4534 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4535 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4536 *
4537 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4538 */
4539 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4540
4541 /**
4542 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4543 *
4544 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4545 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4546 * before calling this function.
4547 *
4548 * @hw: the hardware to free
4549 */
4550 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4551
4552 /**
4553 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4554 *
4555 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4556 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4557 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4558 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4559 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4560 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4561 *
4562 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4563 */
4564 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4565
4566 /**
4567 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4568 *
4569 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4570 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4571 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4572 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4573 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4574 *
4575 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4576 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4577 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4578 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4579 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4580 *
4581 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4582 *
4583 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4584 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4585 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4586 * @list: the destination list
4587 */
4588 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4589 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4590
4591 /**
4592 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4593 *
4594 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4595 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4596 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4597 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4598 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4599 *
4600 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4601 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4602 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4603 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4604 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4605 *
4606 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4607 *
4608 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4609 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4610 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4611 * @napi: the NAPI context
4612 */
4613 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4614 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4615
4616 /**
4617 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4618 *
4619 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4620 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4621 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4622 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4623 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4624 *
4625 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4626 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4627 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4628 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4629 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4630 *
4631 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4632 *
4633 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4634 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4635 */
ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4636 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4637 {
4638 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4639 }
4640
4641 /**
4642 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4643 *
4644 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4645 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4646 *
4647 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4648 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4649 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4650 *
4651 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4652 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4653 */
4654 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4655
4656 /**
4657 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4658 *
4659 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4660 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4661 *
4662 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4663 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4664 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4665 *
4666 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4667 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4668 */
ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4669 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4670 struct sk_buff *skb)
4671 {
4672 local_bh_disable();
4673 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4674 local_bh_enable();
4675 }
4676
4677 /**
4678 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4679 *
4680 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4681 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4682 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4683 *
4684 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4685 *
4686 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4687 * each other.
4688 *
4689 * @sta: currently connected sta
4690 * @start: start or stop PS
4691 *
4692 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4693 */
4694 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4695
4696 /**
4697 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4698 * (in process context)
4699 *
4700 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4701 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4702 * applies.
4703 *
4704 * @sta: currently connected sta
4705 * @start: start or stop PS
4706 *
4707 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4708 */
ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,bool start)4709 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4710 bool start)
4711 {
4712 int ret;
4713
4714 local_bh_disable();
4715 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4716 local_bh_enable();
4717
4718 return ret;
4719 }
4720
4721 /**
4722 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4723 * @sta: currently connected station
4724 *
4725 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4726 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4727 * connected station was received.
4728 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4729 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4730 * be serialized.
4731 */
4732 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4733
4734 /**
4735 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4736 * @sta: currently connected station
4737 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4738 *
4739 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4740 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4741 * from a connected station was received.
4742 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4743 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4744 * serialized.
4745 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4746 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4747 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4748 * checks.
4749 */
4750 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4751
4752 /*
4753 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4754 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4755 */
4756 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
4757
4758 /**
4759 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4760 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4761 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4762 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4763 *
4764 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4765 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4766 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4767 *
4768 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4769 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4770 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4771 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4772 *
4773 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4774 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4775 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4776 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4777 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4778 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4779 *
4780 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4781 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4782 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4783 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4784 * use this API.
4785 */
4786 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4787 u8 tid, bool buffered);
4788
4789 /**
4790 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4791 *
4792 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4793 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4794 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4795 *
4796 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4797 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4798 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4799 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4800 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4801 */
4802 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4803 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4804 struct sk_buff *skb,
4805 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4806 int max_rates);
4807
4808 /**
4809 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4810 *
4811 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4812 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4813 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4814 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4815 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4816 * slow stations to starve).
4817 *
4818 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4819 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4820 */
4821 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4822 u32 thr);
4823
4824 /**
4825 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4826 *
4827 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4828 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4829 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4830 *
4831 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4832 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4833 * @info: tx status information
4834 */
4835 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4836 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4837 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4838
4839 /**
4840 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4841 *
4842 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4843 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4844 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4845 *
4846 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4847 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4848 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4849 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4850 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4851 *
4852 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4853 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4854 */
4855 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4856 struct sk_buff *skb);
4857
4858 /**
4859 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4860 *
4861 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4862 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4863 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4864 *
4865 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4866 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4867 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4868 *
4869 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4870 * @status: tx status information
4871 */
4872 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4873 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4874
4875 /**
4876 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4877 *
4878 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4879 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4880 * specific skbs.
4881 *
4882 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4883 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4884 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4885 *
4886 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4887 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4888 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4889 * @info: tx status information
4890 */
ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_sta * sta,struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)4891 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4892 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4893 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4894 {
4895 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4896 .sta = sta,
4897 .info = info,
4898 };
4899
4900 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4901 }
4902
4903 /**
4904 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4905 *
4906 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4907 *
4908 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4909 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4910 * for a single hardware.
4911 *
4912 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4913 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4914 */
ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4915 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4916 struct sk_buff *skb)
4917 {
4918 local_bh_disable();
4919 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4920 local_bh_enable();
4921 }
4922
4923 /**
4924 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4925 *
4926 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4927 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4928 *
4929 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4930 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4931 *
4932 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4933 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4934 */
4935 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4936 struct sk_buff *skb);
4937
4938 /**
4939 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4940 *
4941 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4942 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4943 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4944 * 802.11 frames.
4945 *
4946 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4947 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4948 * calls in the same tx status family.
4949 *
4950 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4951 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4952 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4953 */
4954 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4955 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4956 struct sk_buff *skb);
4957
4958 /**
4959 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4960 *
4961 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4962 * connected STA.
4963 *
4964 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4965 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4966 */
4967 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4968
4969 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4970
4971 /**
4972 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4973 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4974 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4975 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4976 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which
4977 * should be ignored.
4978 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element
4979 */
4980 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4981 u16 tim_offset;
4982 u16 tim_length;
4983
4984 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
4985 u16 mbssid_off;
4986 };
4987
4988 /**
4989 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4990 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4991 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4992 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4993 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4994 *
4995 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4996 * obtain the beacon template.
4997 *
4998 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4999 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
5000 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
5001 * applicable, the CSA count.
5002 *
5003 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5004 *
5005 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5006 */
5007 struct sk_buff *
5008 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5009 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5010 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
5011
5012 /**
5013 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
5014 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5015 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5016 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
5017 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5018 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
5019 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
5020 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5021 *
5022 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5023 * obtain the beacon frame.
5024 *
5025 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5026 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
5027 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
5028 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
5029 *
5030 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5031 *
5032 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5033 */
5034 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5035 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5036 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
5037
5038 /**
5039 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
5040 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5041 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5042 *
5043 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5044 *
5045 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5046 */
ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_vif * vif)5047 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5048 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5049 {
5050 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
5051 }
5052
5053 /**
5054 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
5055 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5056 *
5057 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
5058 * This function is called implicitly when
5059 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
5060 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
5061 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
5062 *
5063 * Return: new countdown value
5064 */
5065 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5066
5067 /**
5068 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
5069 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5070 * @counter: the new value for the counter
5071 *
5072 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
5073 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
5074 *
5075 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
5076 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
5077 */
5078 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
5079
5080 /**
5081 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
5082 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5083 *
5084 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5085 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5086 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
5087 */
5088 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5089
5090 /**
5091 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
5092 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5093 *
5094 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
5095 */
5096 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5097
5098 /**
5099 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change
5100 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5101 *
5102 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5103 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5104 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed
5105 */
5106 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5107
5108 /**
5109 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
5110 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5111 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5112 *
5113 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5114 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
5115 *
5116 * Can only be called in AP mode.
5117 *
5118 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
5119 */
5120 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5121 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5122
5123 /**
5124 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
5125 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5126 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5127 *
5128 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5129 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5130 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5131 *
5132 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5133 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5134 *
5135 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5136 */
5137 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5138 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5139
5140 /**
5141 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5142 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5143 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5144 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5145 * if at all possible
5146 *
5147 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5148 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5149 * BSSID and address is used.
5150 *
5151 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5152 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5153 *
5154 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5155 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5156 *
5157 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5158 */
5159 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5160 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5161 bool qos_ok);
5162
5163 /**
5164 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5165 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5166 * @src_addr: source MAC address
5167 * @ssid: SSID buffer
5168 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5169 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5170 *
5171 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5172 * hardware.
5173 *
5174 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5175 */
5176 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5177 const u8 *src_addr,
5178 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5179 size_t tailroom);
5180
5181 /**
5182 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5183 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5184 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5185 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5186 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5187 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5188 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5189 *
5190 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5191 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5192 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5193 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5194 */
5195 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5196 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5197 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5198 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5199
5200 /**
5201 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5202 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5203 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5204 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5205 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5206 *
5207 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5208 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5209 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5210 *
5211 * Return: The duration.
5212 */
5213 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5214 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5215 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5216
5217 /**
5218 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5219 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5220 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5221 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5222 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5223 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5224 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5225 *
5226 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5227 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5228 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5229 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5230 */
5231 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5232 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5233 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5234 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5235 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5236
5237 /**
5238 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5239 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5240 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5241 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5242 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5243 *
5244 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5245 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5246 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5247 *
5248 * Return: The duration.
5249 */
5250 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5251 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5252 size_t frame_len,
5253 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5254
5255 /**
5256 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5257 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5258 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5259 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5260 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5261 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5262 *
5263 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5264 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5265 *
5266 * Return: The duration.
5267 */
5268 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5269 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5270 enum nl80211_band band,
5271 size_t frame_len,
5272 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5273
5274 /**
5275 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5276 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5277 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5278 *
5279 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5280 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5281 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5282 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5283 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5284 *
5285 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5286 * frames are available.
5287 *
5288 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5289 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5290 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5291 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5292 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5293 * use common code for all beacons.
5294 */
5295 struct sk_buff *
5296 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5297
5298 /**
5299 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5300 *
5301 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5302 *
5303 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5304 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5305 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5306 */
5307 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5308 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5309
5310 /**
5311 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5312 *
5313 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5314 * from the given packet.
5315 *
5316 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5317 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5318 * with this P1K
5319 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5320 */
ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf * keyconf,struct sk_buff * skb,u16 * p1k)5321 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5322 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5323 {
5324 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5325 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5326 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5327
5328 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5329 }
5330
5331 /**
5332 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5333 *
5334 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5335 * and transmitter address.
5336 *
5337 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5338 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5339 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5340 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5341 */
5342 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5343 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5344
5345 /**
5346 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5347 *
5348 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5349 * in the packet.
5350 *
5351 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5352 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5353 * encrypted with this key
5354 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5355 */
5356 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5357 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5358
5359 /**
5360 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5361 *
5362 * @pos: start of crypto header
5363 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5364 * @pn: PN to add
5365 *
5366 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5367 * the packet payload)
5368 *
5369 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5370 * point to the crypto header)
5371 */
5372 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5373
5374 /**
5375 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5376 *
5377 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5378 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5379 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5380 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5381 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5382 *
5383 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5384 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5385 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5386 *
5387 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5388 * can be done concurrently.
5389 */
5390 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5391 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5392
5393 /**
5394 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5395 *
5396 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5397 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5398 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5399 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5400 * @seq: new sequence data
5401 *
5402 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5403 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5404 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5405 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5406 *
5407 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5408 * can be done concurrently.
5409 */
5410 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5411 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5412
5413 /**
5414 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5415 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5416 *
5417 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5418 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5419 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5420 *
5421 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5422 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5423 */
5424 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5425
5426 /**
5427 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5428 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5429 * @keyconf: new key data
5430 *
5431 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5432 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5433 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5434 *
5435 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5436 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5437 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5438 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5439 *
5440 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5441 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5442 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5443 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5444 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5445 * of the reconfiguration.
5446 *
5447 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5448 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5449 *
5450 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5451 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5452 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5453 * the key that's being replaced.
5454 */
5455 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5456 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5457 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5458
5459 /**
5460 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5461 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5462 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5463 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5464 * @gfp: allocation flags
5465 */
5466 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5467 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5468
5469 /**
5470 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5471 *
5472 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5473 * at the same time.
5474 *
5475 * @keyconf: the key in question
5476 */
5477 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5478
5479 /**
5480 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5481 *
5482 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5483 * at the same time.
5484 *
5485 * @keyconf: the key in question
5486 */
5487 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5488
5489 /**
5490 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5491 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5492 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5493 *
5494 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5495 */
5496 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5497
5498 /**
5499 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5500 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5501 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5502 *
5503 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5504 */
5505 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5506
5507 /**
5508 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5509 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5510 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5511 *
5512 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5513 *
5514 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5515 */
5516
5517 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5518
5519 /**
5520 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5521 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5522 *
5523 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5524 */
5525 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5526
5527 /**
5528 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5529 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5530 *
5531 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5532 */
5533 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5534
5535 /**
5536 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5537 *
5538 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5539 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5540 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5541 * any context, including hardirq context.
5542 *
5543 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5544 * @info: information about the completed scan
5545 */
5546 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5547 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5548
5549 /**
5550 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5551 *
5552 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5553 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5554 *
5555 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5556 */
5557 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5558
5559 /**
5560 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5561 *
5562 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5563 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5564 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5565 * while associating, for instance.
5566 *
5567 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5568 */
5569 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5570
5571 /**
5572 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5573 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5574 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5575 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5576 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5577 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5578 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5579 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5580 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5581 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5582 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5583 * for instance.
5584 */
5585 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5586 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5587 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5588 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
5589 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2),
5590 };
5591
5592 /**
5593 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5594 *
5595 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5596 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5597 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5598 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5599 *
5600 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5601 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5602 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5603 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5604 */
5605 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5606 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5607 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5608 void *data);
5609
5610 /**
5611 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5612 *
5613 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5614 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5615 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5616 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5617 * be used.
5618 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5619 *
5620 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5621 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5622 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5623 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5624 */
5625 static inline void
ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u32 iter_flags,void (* iterator)(void * data,u8 * mac,struct ieee80211_vif * vif),void * data)5626 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5627 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5628 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5629 void *data)
5630 {
5631 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5632 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5633 iterator, data);
5634 }
5635
5636 /**
5637 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5638 *
5639 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5640 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5641 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5642 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5643 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5644 *
5645 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5646 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5647 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5648 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5649 */
5650 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5651 u32 iter_flags,
5652 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5653 u8 *mac,
5654 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5655 void *data);
5656
5657 /**
5658 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
5659 *
5660 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5661 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5662 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
5663 *
5664 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5665 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5666 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5667 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5668 */
5669 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5670 u32 iter_flags,
5671 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5672 u8 *mac,
5673 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5674 void *data);
5675
5676 /**
5677 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5678 *
5679 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5680 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5681 * function for them.
5682 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5683 *
5684 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5685 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5686 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5687 */
5688 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5689 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5690 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5691 void *data);
5692 /**
5693 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5694 *
5695 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5696 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5697 *
5698 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5699 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5700 */
5701 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5702
5703 /**
5704 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5705 *
5706 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5707 * workqueue.
5708 *
5709 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5710 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5711 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5712 */
5713 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5714 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5715 unsigned long delay);
5716
5717 /**
5718 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5719 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5720 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5721 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5722 *
5723 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5724 *
5725 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5726 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5727 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5728 */
5729 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5730 u16 timeout);
5731
5732 /**
5733 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5734 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5735 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5736 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5737 *
5738 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5739 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5740 * from any context.
5741 */
5742 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5743 u16 tid);
5744
5745 /**
5746 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5747 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5748 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5749 *
5750 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5751 *
5752 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5753 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5754 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5755 */
5756 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5757
5758 /**
5759 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5760 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5761 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5762 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5763 *
5764 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5765 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5766 * can be called from any context.
5767 */
5768 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5769 u16 tid);
5770
5771 /**
5772 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5773 *
5774 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5775 * @addr: station's address
5776 *
5777 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5778 *
5779 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5780 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5781 */
5782 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5783 const u8 *addr);
5784
5785 /**
5786 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5787 *
5788 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5789 * @addr: remote station's address
5790 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5791 *
5792 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5793 *
5794 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5795 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5796 *
5797 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5798 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5799 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5800 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5801 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5802 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5803 * is not reliable.
5804 *
5805 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5806 */
5807 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5808 const u8 *addr,
5809 const u8 *localaddr);
5810
5811 /**
5812 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5813 * @hw: the hardware
5814 * @pubsta: the station
5815 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5816 *
5817 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5818 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5819 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5820 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5821 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5822 *
5823 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5824 * manner.
5825 *
5826 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5827 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5828 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5829 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5830 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5831 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5832 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5833 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5834 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5835 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5836 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5837 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5838 * woke up while blocked or not.
5839 */
5840 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5841 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5842
5843 /**
5844 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5845 * @pubsta: the station
5846 *
5847 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5848 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5849 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5850 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5851 *
5852 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5853 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5854 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5855 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5856 *
5857 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5858 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5859 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5860 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
5861 */
5862 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5863
5864 /**
5865 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5866 * @pubsta: the station
5867 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5868 *
5869 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5870 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5871 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5872 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5873 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5874 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5875 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5876 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5877 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5878 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5879 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5880 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5881 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5882 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5883 */
5884 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5885
5886 /**
5887 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5888 *
5889 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
5890 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5891 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5892 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5893 *
5894 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5895 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5896 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5897 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5898 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5899 * attempts.
5900 *
5901 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5902 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5903 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5904 * them to 0.
5905 *
5906 * @pubsta: the station
5907 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5908 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5909 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5910 */
5911 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5912 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5913
5914 /**
5915 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5916 *
5917 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5918 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5919 *
5920 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5921 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5922 */
5923 bool
5924 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5925
5926 /**
5927 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5928 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5929 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5930 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5931 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5932 *
5933 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5934 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5935 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5936 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5937 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5938 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5939 *
5940 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5941 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5942 * set_key callback.
5943 */
5944 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5945 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5946 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5947 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5948 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5949 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5950 void *data),
5951 void *iter_data);
5952
5953 /**
5954 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5955 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5956 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5957 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5958 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5959 *
5960 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5961 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5962 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5963 * in removal process will be skipped.
5964 *
5965 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5966 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5967 */
5968 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5969 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5970 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5971 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5972 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5973 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5974 void *data),
5975 void *iter_data);
5976
5977 /**
5978 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5979 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5980 * @iter: iterator function
5981 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5982 *
5983 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5984 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5985 * places while calling into the driver.
5986 *
5987 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5988 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5989 * removed.
5990 *
5991 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5992 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5993 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5994 * or not.
5995 */
5996 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5997 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5998 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5999 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
6000 void *data),
6001 void *iter_data);
6002
6003 /**
6004 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
6005 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6006 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6007 *
6008 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
6009 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
6010 * information. This function must only be called from within the
6011 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
6012 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
6013 * %NULL.
6014 *
6015 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
6016 */
6017 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6018 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6019
6020 /**
6021 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
6022 *
6023 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6024 *
6025 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
6026 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
6027 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
6028 */
6029 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6030
6031 /**
6032 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
6033 *
6034 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6035 *
6036 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
6037 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
6038 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
6039 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
6040 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
6041 *
6042 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
6043 * without connection recovery attempts.
6044 */
6045 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6046
6047 /**
6048 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
6049 *
6050 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6051 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
6052 *
6053 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
6054 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
6055 */
6056 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
6057
6058 /**
6059 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
6060 *
6061 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6062 *
6063 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
6064 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
6065 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
6066 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
6067 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
6068 *
6069 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
6070 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
6071 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
6072 * disconnect normally later.
6073 *
6074 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
6075 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
6076 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
6077 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
6078 */
6079 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6080
6081 /**
6082 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
6083 * rssi threshold triggered
6084 *
6085 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6086 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
6087 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
6088 * @gfp: context flags
6089 *
6090 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
6091 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
6092 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
6093 */
6094 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6095 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
6096 s32 rssi_level,
6097 gfp_t gfp);
6098
6099 /**
6100 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
6101 *
6102 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6103 * @gfp: context flags
6104 */
6105 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
6106
6107 /**
6108 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
6109 *
6110 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6111 */
6112 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6113
6114 /**
6115 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
6116 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6117 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
6118 *
6119 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
6120 * and wake up the suspended queues.
6121 */
6122 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
6123
6124 /**
6125 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6126 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6127 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6128 *
6129 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6130 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6131 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6132 */
6133 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6134 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6135
6136 /**
6137 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6138 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6139 */
6140 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6141
6142 /**
6143 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6144 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6145 */
6146 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6147
6148 /**
6149 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6150 *
6151 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6152 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6153 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6154 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6155 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6156 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6157 *
6158 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6159 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6160 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6161 */
6162 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6163 const u8 *addr);
6164
6165 /**
6166 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6167 * @pubsta: station struct
6168 * @tid: the session's TID
6169 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6170 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
6171 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6172 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6173 *
6174 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6175 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6176 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6177 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6178 */
6179 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6180 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6181 u16 received_mpdus);
6182
6183 /**
6184 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6185 *
6186 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6187 * buffer.
6188 *
6189 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6190 * @ra: the peer's destination address
6191 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6192 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6193 */
6194 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6195
6196 /**
6197 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6198 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6199 * @addr: station mac address
6200 * @tid: the rx tid
6201 */
6202 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6203 unsigned int tid);
6204
6205 /**
6206 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6207 *
6208 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6209 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6210 * reordering.
6211 *
6212 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6213 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6214 *
6215 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6216 * @addr: station mac address
6217 * @tid: the rx tid
6218 */
ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6219 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6220 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6221 {
6222 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6223 return;
6224 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6225 }
6226
6227 /**
6228 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6229 *
6230 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6231 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6232 * reordering.
6233 *
6234 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6235 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6236 *
6237 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6238 * @addr: station mac address
6239 * @tid: the rx tid
6240 */
ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6241 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6242 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6243 {
6244 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6245 return;
6246 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6247 }
6248
6249 /**
6250 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6251 *
6252 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6253 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6254 *
6255 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6256 *
6257 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6258 * @addr: station mac address
6259 * @tid: the rx tid
6260 */
6261 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6262 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6263
6264 /* Rate control API */
6265
6266 /**
6267 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6268 *
6269 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6270 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6271 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6272 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6273 * to be filled in
6274 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6275 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6276 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6277 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6278 * RTS threshold
6279 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6280 * if the selected rate supports it
6281 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6282 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6283 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6284 */
6285 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6286 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6287 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6288 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6289 struct sk_buff *skb;
6290 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6291 bool rts, short_preamble;
6292 u32 rate_idx_mask;
6293 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6294 bool bss;
6295 };
6296
6297 /**
6298 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6299 */
6300 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6301 /**
6302 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6303 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6304 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6305 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6306 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6307 */
6308 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6309 /**
6310 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER:
6311 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx
6312 */
6313 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1),
6314 };
6315
6316 struct rate_control_ops {
6317 unsigned long capa;
6318 const char *name;
6319 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6320 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6321 struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6322 void (*free)(void *priv);
6323
6324 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6325 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6326 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6327 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6328 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6329 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6330 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6331 u32 changed);
6332 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6333 void *priv_sta);
6334
6335 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6336 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6337 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6338 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6339 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6340 struct sk_buff *skb);
6341 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6342 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6343
6344 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6345 struct dentry *dir);
6346
6347 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6348
6349 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
6350 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(2);
6351 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(3);
6352 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(4);
6353 };
6354
rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,enum nl80211_band band,int index)6355 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6356 enum nl80211_band band,
6357 int index)
6358 {
6359 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6360 }
6361
6362 static inline s8
rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6363 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6364 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6365 {
6366 int i;
6367
6368 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6369 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6370 return i;
6371
6372 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6373 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6374
6375 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6376 return 0;
6377 }
6378
6379 static inline
rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6380 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6381 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6382 {
6383 unsigned int i;
6384
6385 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6386 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6387 return true;
6388 return false;
6389 }
6390
6391 /**
6392 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6393 *
6394 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6395 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6396 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6397 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6398 *
6399 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6400 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6401 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6402 */
6403 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6404 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6405 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6406
6407 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6408 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6409
6410 static inline bool
conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6411 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6412 {
6413 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6414 }
6415
6416 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6417 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6418 {
6419 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6420 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6421 }
6422
6423 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6424 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6425 {
6426 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6427 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6428 }
6429
6430 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6431 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6432 {
6433 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6434 }
6435
6436 static inline bool
conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6437 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6438 {
6439 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6440 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6441 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6442 }
6443
6444 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type,bool p2p)6445 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6446 {
6447 if (p2p) {
6448 switch (type) {
6449 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6450 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6451 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6452 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6453 default:
6454 break;
6455 }
6456 }
6457 return type;
6458 }
6459
6460 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)6461 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6462 {
6463 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6464 }
6465
6466 /**
6467 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6468 *
6469 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6470 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6471 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6472 *
6473 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6474 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6475 * matching GroupId management frame.
6476 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6477 */
6478 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6479 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6480
6481 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6482 int rssi_min_thold,
6483 int rssi_max_thold);
6484
6485 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6486
6487 /**
6488 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6489 *
6490 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6491 *
6492 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6493 *
6494 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6495 * applicable.
6496 */
6497 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6498
6499 /**
6500 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6501 * @vif: virtual interface
6502 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6503 * @gfp: allocation flags
6504 *
6505 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6506 */
6507 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6508 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6509 gfp_t gfp);
6510
6511 /**
6512 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6513 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6514 * @vif: virtual interface
6515 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6516 * @band: the band to transmit on
6517 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6518 *
6519 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6520 */
6521 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6522 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6523 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6524
6525 /**
6526 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6527 * of injected frames.
6528 *
6529 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
6530 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
6531 * of the skb before calling this function.
6532 *
6533 * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6534 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6535 */
6536 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6537 struct net_device *dev);
6538
6539 /**
6540 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6541 *
6542 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6543 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6544 *
6545 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6546 *
6547 * private:
6548 *
6549 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6550 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6551 */
6552 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6553 u32 next_tsf;
6554 bool has_next_tsf;
6555
6556 u8 absent;
6557
6558 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6559 struct {
6560 u32 start;
6561 u32 duration;
6562 u32 interval;
6563 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6564 };
6565
6566 /**
6567 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6568 *
6569 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6570 * @data: NoA tracking data
6571 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6572 *
6573 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6574 */
6575 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6576 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6577
6578 /**
6579 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6580 *
6581 * @data: NoA tracking data
6582 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6583 */
6584 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6585
6586 /**
6587 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6588 * @vif: virtual interface
6589 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6590 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6591 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6592 * @gfp: allocation flags
6593 *
6594 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6595 */
6596 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6597 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6598 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6599
6600 /**
6601 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6602 *
6603 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6604 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6605 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6606 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6607 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6608 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6609 *
6610 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6611 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6612 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6613 *
6614 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6615 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6616 *
6617 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6618 */
6619 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6620
6621 /**
6622 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6623 *
6624 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6625 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6626 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6627 *
6628 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6629 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6630 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6631 *
6632 * @sta: the station
6633 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6634 */
6635 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6636
6637 /**
6638 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6639 *
6640 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6641 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6642 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6643 *
6644 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6645 *
6646 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6647 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6648 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6649 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6650 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6651 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6652 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6653 *
6654 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6655 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6656 */
6657 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6658 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6659
6660 /**
6661 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6662 * (in process context)
6663 *
6664 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6665 * (internally disables bottom halves).
6666 *
6667 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6668 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6669 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6670 */
ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6671 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6672 struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6673 {
6674 struct sk_buff *skb;
6675
6676 local_bh_disable();
6677 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6678 local_bh_enable();
6679
6680 return skb;
6681 }
6682
6683 /**
6684 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6685 *
6686 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6687 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6688 *
6689 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6690 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6691 * driver has finished scheduling it.
6692 */
6693 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6694
6695 /**
6696 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6697 *
6698 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6699 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6700 *
6701 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6702 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6703 */
6704 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6705
6706 /* (deprecated) */
ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u8 ac)6707 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6708 {
6709 }
6710
6711 /**
6712 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6713 *
6714 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6715 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6716 *
6717 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6718 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6719 *
6720 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6721 * this TXQ internally.
6722 */
6723 void ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6724
6725 /**
6726 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6727 *
6728 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6729 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6730 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6731 *
6732 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6733 * internally.
6734 */
6735 void ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6736 bool force);
6737
6738 /**
6739 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6740 *
6741 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6742 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6743 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6744 * next_txq().
6745 *
6746 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6747 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6748 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6749 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6750 * again.
6751 *
6752 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6753 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6754 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6755 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6756 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6757 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6758 *
6759 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6760 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6761 */
6762 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6763 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6764
6765 /**
6766 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6767 *
6768 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6769 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6770 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6771 *
6772 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6773 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6774 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6775 */
6776 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6777 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6778 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6779
6780 /**
6781 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6782 *
6783 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6784 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6785 *
6786 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6787 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6788 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6789 * @gfp: allocation flags
6790 */
6791 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6792 u8 inst_id,
6793 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6794 gfp_t gfp);
6795
6796 /**
6797 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6798 *
6799 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6800 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6801 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6802 *
6803 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6804 * @match: match event information
6805 * @gfp: allocation flags
6806 */
6807 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6808 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6809 gfp_t gfp);
6810
6811 /**
6812 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6813 *
6814 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6815 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6816 *
6817 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6818 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6819 * information.
6820 * @len: frame length in bytes
6821 */
6822 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6823 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6824 int len);
6825
6826 /**
6827 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6828 *
6829 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6830 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6831 *
6832 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6833 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6834 * @len: frame length in bytes
6835 */
6836 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6837 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6838 int len);
6839 /**
6840 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6841 *
6842 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6843 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6844 * hardware or firmware.
6845 *
6846 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6847 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6848 */
6849 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6850
6851 /**
6852 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
6853 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6854 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6855 *
6856 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6857 *
6858 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
6859 */
6860 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6861 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6862
6863 /**
6864 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
6865 * probe response template.
6866 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6867 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6868 *
6869 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6870 *
6871 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
6872 */
6873 struct sk_buff *
6874 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6875 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6876
6877 /**
6878 * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color
6879 * collision.
6880 *
6881 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6882 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is
6883 * aware of.
6884 */
6885 void
6886 ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6887 u64 color_bitmap);
6888
6889 /**
6890 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame
6891 *
6892 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with
6893 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames.
6894 *
6895 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
6896 */
ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff * skb)6897 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb)
6898 {
6899 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb);
6900 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data;
6901
6902 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP ||
6903 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control);
6904 }
6905
6906 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6907